amoozesh-coreldraw

CorelDRAW X4 ‫ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬

www.parsbook.org

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪CorelDRAW X4‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﮐﻮﺭﻝ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ –1‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﮐﻮﺭﻝ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻠﻴﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻮﺭﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪ Toolbar‬ﺭﺍﻳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-2‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻴﮏ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Windows‬ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ Toolbars‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-3‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪Window‬‬

‫‪ Window‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫‪ Tile Horizontally Cascade ,‬ﻭ ‪ Tile Vertically‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Toolbox‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ Toolbox .‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-4‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬

‫‪ Pick Tool‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ‪ Toolbox‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

‫‪ Zoomtool‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ‪Toolbox‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪Zoomtool‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺰﺭگ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-5‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬

‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﯽ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ‪ %100‬ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺷﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻴﺊ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺳﻄﺢ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻭی ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ View‬ﺍﻭﻧﺎﻉ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻮﺭﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎی ‪ Simple Wireframe‬ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﻧﻤﺎی ‪ Wireframe‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﻧﻤﺎی ‪Draft‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ‪ Fountain‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮑﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ‪ Bitmap‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎی ‪Normal‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎی ‪ Enhanced‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﯽء ﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﺎﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﻧﻤﺎی ‪Enhanced with‬‬ ‫‪ Overprints‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ‪Enhanced‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺷﯽء ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺣﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Handtool‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Zoomtool‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Rectangle Tool‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ , ctrl‬ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪:2‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ‪ shift‬ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫‪ 3point Rectangle Tool -2‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ 3‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪rectangle tool‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-6‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪Rectangle Tool‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪ x .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻭ ‪Y‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻫﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ,‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﮐﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮی ﻻﻳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-7‬ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺁﺑﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﺎی ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮﺯ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫‪ Convert To Curve :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ) ﻃﺮﺯ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ(‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Ellipse Tool‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Ellipse Tool‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Ellipse tool‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪3d Point Ellipse Tool‬‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﻀﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ 3‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ : 1‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ctrl‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪: 2‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ shift‬ﺑﻴﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﻀﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎچ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﻀﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻀﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎچ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-8‬ﻗﺎچ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻀﯽ‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﻀﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺳﻢ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪ : Polygon Tool‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺁﻥ ‪ 5‬ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-9‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﯽ ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ‪3‬ﺿﻠﻊ ﻭ ﺑﺒﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ‪ 500‬ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-10‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Star Tool‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺳﻢ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-11‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻭ ﺗﻴﺰی ﺷﺘﺎﺭﻩ‬

‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﭘﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-12‬ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﺪی ‪ Complex Star Tool‬ﮐﻪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ Star Tool‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ star tool‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﭘﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-13‬ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Star Tool‬‬

‫‪Graph Paper Tool‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ Complex Star Tool‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ‪ 99‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Graph Paper Tool‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-14‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪Graph Paper Tool‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺍی ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ edit fill‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Uniform Fill‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫‪border‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻫﺎ ﺯﺧﻴﻢ ﺗﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺧﺎﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Ountline Pen Dialog‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍی ‪ Outline Pen‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ : Automatically resize cells while typing‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻴﮏ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻴﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ separated cell borders‬ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪ Horizontal cell spacing‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪ Vertical cell spacing‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪ Table‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Create New Table‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻳﮑﺴﺮی ﺍﻃﺎﻻﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪OK‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻫﺎ ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﺑﻌﻀﺐ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮑﺎﺭی ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻳﺰﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Distribute‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻫﺎی ِ ‪ Rows Evenly‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ‪ Columns Evenly‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻨﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻄﺮ ‪ ,‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﯽ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Delete‬ﺳﻄﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺫﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻫﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬ﺭﻭی ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Insert‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ Row Above .‬ﻭ ‪ Row Below‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﺝ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻی ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Columns Left‬ﻭ ‪ Columns Right‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Insert Rows‬ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﻘﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Insert Columns‬ﻫﻢ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Table‬ﻫﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ spiral tool‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺎﺭﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ graph paper tool‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﺭﭘﻴﭻ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺎﺭﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﻟﮕﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﯽ ﻭﻣﺎﺭﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﻥ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﺎﺭﭘﻴﺞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﺭﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺎﺭﭘﻴﭻ ﻟﮕﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫‪ prefect shape flyout‬ﺭﺍ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

‫‪ : basic shape‬ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﯽ‬

‫‪ : arrow shapes‬ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﮑﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ :flowcharts shapes‬ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻠﻮﭼﺎﺭﺕ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫‪ : banner shapes‬ﺷﮑﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻨﺮ‬ ‫‪: callout shapes‬ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺒﺮی‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻟﻮﺯی ﻫﺎی ﺁﺑﯽ ‪ ,‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻭ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻭ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪freehand tool‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Bezier tool‬ﻃﺮﺯ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﮐﻤﯽ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺒﺘﺪی‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ‪freehand tool‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ‪freehand tool‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ Selector‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺧﻂ‬

‫‪End Arrowhead‬‬

‫‪ Outline Style Selector‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫‪ Start Arrowhead Selector‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍی ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ artistic media‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪freehand tool‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Bezier tool‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Auto-Close Curve‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ 5‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ --1‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪preset‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-15‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪preset‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ‪ artistic media tool width‬ﺯﺧﺎﻣﺖ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ freehand smoothing‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺎﻑ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ‪ artistic media tool width‬ﻭ ‪ freehand smoothing‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ curve flyout‬ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻗﻠﻤﻮﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬

‫‪,‬‬

‫ﻗﻠﻤﻮ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬

‫ﻗﻠﻤﻮ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺴﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻮﺭﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪brush‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-16‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Brush‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ artistic media tool width‬ﻭ ‪ freehand smoothing‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪preset‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫‪-3‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪sprayer‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-17‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪sprayer‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ freehand smoothing‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺎﻑ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﯽ ﻭ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﯽ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ randomly‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ‪ sequentially ,‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﯽ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭ ‪ by direction‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﮐﻪ ‪ add to spraylist‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﭙﺮﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺳﭙﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﭘﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﺮی‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ Spraylist Dialog‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍی ‪Create Playlist‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-18‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Create Playlist‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ‪ Remove Add‬ﻭ ‪Clear‬ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ‬

‫‪Rotation‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Use offset‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Reset Value‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-4‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ calligraphic‬ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬

‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Freehand Smoothing‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﺎﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Artistic Media Tool Width‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺧﺎﻣﺖ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫‪Calligraphic Angle‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-5‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪pressure‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ )ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻬﺘﯽ ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺧﻂ ﮐﻠﻔﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺪ ﺧﻂ ﻧﺎﺯک ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪pen tool‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ pen‬ﺩﺭ ‪ photoshop‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ‪ artistic tool‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪polyline‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺳﻢ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺑﻞ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ pen tool‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪3point curve tool‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ interactive connector line‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ‪ 3point curve tool‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-19‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪connector line‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Dimension Tool‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-20‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‬

‫ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی‬

‫‪ Dimension Style‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Dimension Precision‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﺎی‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Dimension Units‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Show Units for Dimension‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ‪ Prefix‬ﻭ ‪ Suffix‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Dynamic Dimensioning‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺷﯽء ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻫﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی ‪ Text Position Drop Down‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪smart drawing tool‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺸﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺗﺮی ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪smart‬‬ ‫‪ fill tool‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪smart fill tool‬ﺩﺭ ‪ toolbox‬ﺷﺸﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﻭی ‪ smart fill color‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ smart drawing‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-21‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪smart drawing‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Shape Recognition Level‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Smart Smoothing Level‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺎﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Select an Outline width or type in a new width‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﺧﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﯽء ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ‪CorelDRAW‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﺵ ﺷﯽء ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪ CorelDRAW‬ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺷﯽء ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Pick Tool‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺷﯽء ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺿﺮﺑﺪﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺷﯽء ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺷﯽء ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬

‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻠﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺳﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻠﺶ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮑﺎﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻠﺶ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮑﺎﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺿﺮﺑﺪﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺷﯽء ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺷﯽء ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﮐﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻴﺪ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺷﮑﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﮔﺮ ﺷﻴﺌﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﯽء ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﯽء ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﯽء ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ؟ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﺵ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‬

‫‪ Alt‬ﻭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺮﺑﻊ )ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-1‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Shift‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ Shift‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﮏ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ‪ ,‬ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Shift‬ﻭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪,‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺮﺑﺪﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Edit‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺷﯽء ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ‪, Cut‬‬ ‫‪ Copy‬ﻭ ‪ paste‬ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﺿﯽ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﺑﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ‪ Ctrl+Z‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Edit‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Undo‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Undo‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ Ctrl+Shift+Z .‬ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Edit‬ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ Redo‬ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Redo‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Undo‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽء ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪-1 :‬ﺭﻭی ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Delete‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪-2‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Edit‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Delete‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Delete‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻔﺸﺎﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ‪ Ctrl+R‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ‪ Ctrl+D‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Duplicate‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Edit‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Arrange‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Group‬ﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ‪ Ctrl+G‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺷﯽء ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺸﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫‪ Arrange‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Ungroup‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ‪ Ctrl+u‬ﮐﻤﮏ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ Combine‬ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Arrange‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ‪ Ctrl+L‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ Combine‬ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺸﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪Arrange‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Break Apart‬ﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ‪ Ctrl+K‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺟﺎی ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫‪ Arrange‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Order‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ Order‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ FreeHand‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪Outline‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻂ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Outline‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪ Outline Flyout‬ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Outline‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Outline Pen‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-3‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Outline Pen‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Color‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Width‬ﺯﺧﺎﻣﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‪ Style‬ﻣﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Edit Style‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Miter limit‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻴﺰ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Corner‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﮔﻮ ﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Line Caps‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺏ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Arrow‬ﺩﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Options‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻠﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Calligraphy‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ Stretch‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ‪ Angle‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ Behind Fill‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪ Default‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺷﯽء ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﯽء ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Scale with image‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪shape tool‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ shape tool‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ‪ toolbox‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﻀﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻮﺭﻝ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻴﻀﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ picktool‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ convert to curve‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪arrange‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ convert to curve‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ‪ Ctrl + Q‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ؟ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪shape tool‬ﺣﺴﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪shape tool‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﻢ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ؟ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪.‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺷﺌﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻭﺍﻗﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪shape tool‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﮐﺠﺎﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ )ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ (‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺭی ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ shape tool‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮑﺎﺭی ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Shape Tool‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺁﺑﯽ ﺷﮑﻞ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺱ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻩ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮑﺎﺭی ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-4‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‪ Slecetion Mode‬ﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Add Node‬ﻭ ‪ Delete Node‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Join To Nodes‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺮﻩ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ curve‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫‪Break‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Cnovert Curve To Line‬ﺧﻂ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Convert Line To Curve‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Make Node A Cusp‬ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺮﻩ ﺗﺒﺰ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Make Node Smooth‬ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺮﻩ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Make Node Symmetrical‬ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Reverse Curve Direction for selected subpaths‬ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Extend Curve To Close‬ﺷﮑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻨﺪﺩ ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻩ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺧﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Extract subpath‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Auto-Close Curve‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Stretch and Scale Nodes‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Rotate and Skew Nodes‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﮐﺞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Align Nodes‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Reflect Nodes Horizontally‬ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻣﻨﻌﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Reflect Nodes Vertically‬ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻣﻨﻌﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ : Elasstic Mode‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﭼﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﻴﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Select All Nodes‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﮏ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Smudge Brush‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﮑﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭﻭی ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ smudge brush‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﯽء ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﯽء ﭘﺎک ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﯽء ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ smudge brush‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﯽء ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Roughen Brush‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﻳﮏ ﺑﻴﻀﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Roughen Brush‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺷﯽء ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Roughen Brush‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﻢ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-5‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Roughen Brush‬‬

‫‪Enter a value for‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Nib Size‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ frequency of spikes‬ﻫﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Add‬‬ ‫‪ dryout to the effect‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﻧﺪﺍ ﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Enter a fixed value tilt setting‬ﻫﻢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺩﺍﻧﺪﺍﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Spike Direction‬ﻫﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪Fixed‬‬ ‫‪ Auto‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ Enter a fixed value for bearing‬ﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Free Transform Tool‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-6‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪Free Transform Tool‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Free Rotation Tool‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Free Angle Reflection Tool‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Free Scale Tool‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Free Skew Tool‬ﺏ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Apply to Duplicate‬ﻫﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﯽء ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Relative to Object‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﯽء‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Crop Tool‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-7‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Crop Tool‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪Crop Tool‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻴﺰی ﮐﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﻓﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Angle of Rotation‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ‪Clear‬‬ ‫‪ Crop Marqee‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺭﮐﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺎک ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪).‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ(‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪Knife Tool‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺵ ﺷﯽءﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﺜﻼ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Leave As One object‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Auto-Close On Cut‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-8‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Knife Tool‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Eraser Tool‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺷﮑﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-9‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Eraser Tool‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Eraser Thickness‬ﺯﺧﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Eraser‬ﺳﺒﺐ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫‪ Auto-reduce on Erase‬ﺳﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﻤﯽ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Virtual Segment Delete‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﻩ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Interactive Blend Tool‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺷﯽء ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ 2‬ﺷﯽء ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺷﯽء ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Effects‬ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Blend‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Blend Steps‬ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪) .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Blend‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Effect‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ Bevel‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺁﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-10‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ – Blend‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Blend Steps‬‬

‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Interactive Blend Tool‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻴﺠﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭼﻴﺰی ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﯽء ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﻦ‪2‬ﺷﯽء ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺷﯽء ﻫﺎی ﻣﻴﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Loop‬ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﯽء ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Loop‬ﺷﯽء ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ‪ 360‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺩﺍﺑﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ‪2‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻞ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ Path‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ New Path‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺒﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ Apply‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻴﺰی ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﭙﺸﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Blend along full path‬ﻭ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪Apply‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Rotate all objects‬ﺷﯽء ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Fixed Spacing‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Fixed Spacing‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﮑﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Blend Acceleration‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺗﮑﻤﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺗﮑﻤﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Line Accelerations‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ‪Apply‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﮑﻤﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺷﯽء ﻭ ﺗﮑﻤﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﯽء ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻴﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Apply to sizing‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺷﯽء ﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-11‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ - Blend‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Blend Acceleration‬‬

‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Blend Color‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Direct Path‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Clockwise Path‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ Counterclockwise‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-12‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ - Blend‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Blend Color‬‬

‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Miscellaneous Blend‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Map Nodes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﮑﺎﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺷﯽء ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﮔﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ split‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪map nodes‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ Fuze Start .‬ﻭ ‪ Fuze End‬ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ Split‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Ctrl‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﮑﻤﻪ ‪ Fuze‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺷﯽء ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Interactive Blend‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-13‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪Interactive Blend‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Counter Tool‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Effect‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Ctrl+F9‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-14‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Counter‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ‪Counter‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Counter Steps‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﻼﺣﻀﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪To cnter .‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ Inside .‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫‪ Outside‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ‪Apply‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻕ ‪ Inside‬ﻭ ‪ To Center‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺟﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪To Center‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬ﺩﻭﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﮐﻪ ‪ Offset‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ Stpes‬ﻫﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Direct‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Counter Color‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪Cloclwise Path‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ Path‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Counterclockwise Path‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﺩﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ Outline‬ﻭ ‪ Fill color‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ Apply‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Counter Acceleration‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ‪ Object Acceleration‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﯽء ﻫﺎ ﻭ ‪Color‬‬ ‫‪ Acceleration‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Link Accelerations‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻴﮏ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ Interactive Counter Tool‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪Interactive Tool Flyout‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭِﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﻼﺣﻀﻪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-15‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Interactive Counter‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫‪Dockers‬ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ Window‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫‪Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ Fillet .‬ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪ Scallop‬ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ‪ Chamfer‬ﻫﻢ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-16‬ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ‪chamfer , Scallop , Fillet‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Interactive Distortion Tool‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪ Interactive Tool Flyout‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭک ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ Interactive Distortion Tool‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪Push and Pull Distortion‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Preset‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Preset‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Add New Distortion‬ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺎﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Push And‬‬ ‫‪ Pull Distortion Amplitude‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪Center Distortion‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺷﯽء ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Convert TO Curve‬ﺷﯽء ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Copy Distortion properties‬ﻓﻠﺶ ﻣﺸﮑﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻢ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽء ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪Clear Distortion‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺷﯽء ﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﭼﻴﺰی ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Undo‬ﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﯽء ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-17‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Interactive Distortion‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ Zipper Distortion‬ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻳﻢ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﮐﺮ ‪Zipper Dsitortion‬‬ ‫‪ Amplitude‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ‪ Zipper Distortion Frequency‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Random Distortion‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ Smooth Distortion .‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ‪ Local Distortion‬ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪Twister Distortion‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﭽﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺷﯽء ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Clockwise Rotation‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ‪Counterclockwise Rotation‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﺩﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Complete Rotation‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﻳﻌﻨﺐ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺵ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Additional Degrees‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Drop Shadow‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪ Interactive Tool Flyout‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﯽء ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ‪ Preset‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Drop Shadow‬‬ ‫‪ Angle‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Drop Shadow Opacity‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Drop Shadow Feathering‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﺮﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی ‪ Drop Shadpw Feathering Direction‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ‪Feathering Edge‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Drop Shadow Fade‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Drop Shadow Stretch‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺸﺶ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺷﯽء ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Transparency Operation‬‬ ‫‪ Drop Shadow Color‬ﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪی ﮐﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Copy Drop Shadow Properties‬ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺷﯽء ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺷﯽء ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺷﯽء ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪Copy Drop Shadow‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻟﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ Properties‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﺱ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Interactive Drop Shadow Tool‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪ Interactive Tool Flyout‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-18‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‪Interactive Drop‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Envelope‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Effect‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ Vertical , Putty , Orginal , Horizontal‬ﻣﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-19‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ Vertical , Putty , Orginal , Horizontal‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪Envelope‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ‪ Vertical , Putty , Orginal , Horizontal :‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ‪ CIRCLE‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺧﻈﻮﻅ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮ ‪ Apply‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪Add‬‬ ‫‪ Preset‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﻭﺱ ‪ Apply‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Create Form‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺷﮑﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Create Form‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-20‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Envelope‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Interactive Envelope Tool‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪ Intractive Too Flyout‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-21‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪Envelope‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Preset‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Extrude‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Effects‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Extrude Camera‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-22‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ – Extrude‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Extrude Camera‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽء ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Edit‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Small Back‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺷﯽء ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Small Front‬‬ ‫ﺷﯽء ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻘﺐ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻴﻮﺭﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Big Back‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ Extrude Type‬ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Big Front‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ Small Front‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺸﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ‪ Big‬ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﯽء ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Back Parallel‬ﮐﺸﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﺷﯽء ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪Front Paralle‬‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﮐﺸﻴﺪﮐﯽ ﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮی ﺷﯽء ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺷﯽء ﻭﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪Back Parallel‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭی ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ VP Locked To Object‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﯽ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﯽء ﺳﻨﺠﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪ VP Locked To Page‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ …‪ Copy VP From‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽء ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Shared Vashing Point‬ﻫﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻣﯽ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Depth‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﺷﯽء ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺷﯽء ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ,‬ﺑﺎﺭﻳﮑﺘﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻫﺎی ‪H‬ﻭ‪ V‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Measured From‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Page Origin‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Object Center‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﯽء ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Extrude Rotation‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-23‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ – Extrude‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Extrude Rotation‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺷﯽء ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Edit‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻃﺮﻓﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﯽء ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Reset‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Edit‬ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ‪ 3‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎی ‪ Y , X‬ﻭ‪ Z‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Extrude Light‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-24‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ – Extrude‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Extrude Light‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭی ‪ Edit‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻼﺣﻀﻪ ﻣﯽ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ‪ Intensity‬ﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Use Full color range‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺯﻩ ﻭﺳﻴﻌﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Extrude Color‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-25‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ – Extrude‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Extrude Color‬‬

‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Use object Fill‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺷﺌﻴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺷﯽء ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Drape fills‬ﻫﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﻫﺮ ﺷﯽء‬ ‫‪ Solid fill‬ﺷﯽء ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫‪ Shade‬ﻫﻢ ﺷﯽء ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Use Extrude Fill for bevel‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪ Extrude Bevel‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ‪.‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻣﺎﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Extrude Bevel‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-26‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ – Extrude‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Extrude Bevel‬‬

‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺷﯽء ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Use Level‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ Show Bevel Only‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Bevel‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Bevel angle‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Interactive Extrude Tool‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪ Interactive Tool Flyout‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-27‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Extrude‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Transparency‬‬ ‫‪ Interactive Transparency Tool‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫‪ Interactive Tool Flyout‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-28‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Transparency‬ﺍﺯ ‪ Uniform‬ﺗﺎ ‪Square‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Transparency Type‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Transparency‬‬ ‫‪ Operation‬ﻫﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽء ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﯽء‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ‪Transparency Midpoint‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی ‪ Transparency Target‬ﻫﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺷﯽء ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Freeze‬ﻫﻢ ﺷﯽء ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺠﻤﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﯽء‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Transparency Type‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Square‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ Full Color Pattern , Two Color Pattern‬ﻭ‪ Bitmap Pattern‬ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-29‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Transparency‬ﺍﺯ ‪ Two color‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ‪ First transparency Picker‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﻮﻧﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ‪ Ending Transparency‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺷﯽء ﻣﺤﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Mirror Transparency Tiles‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪Create Pattern‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-30‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Create Pattern‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ Resolution‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺒﺪ‪.‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ Bitmap Pattern‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Texture Library‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻠﻴﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻮﺭﻝ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-31‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭﮐﻨﺎﺭی ‪Lens‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Effects‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Lens‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺒﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ‪ Lens‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ ‪ Brighten‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽء ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ Brighten‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ‪ Lens‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Rate‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Frozen‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﯽء ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ViewPoint‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﮐﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‬ ‫‪ Brighten‬ﺻﺪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪Reamove Face‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.‬ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Color Add‬ﻳﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ‪ Color Limit‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺒﺪ‪.‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ‪Color‬‬ ‫‪ Add‬ﻭ ‪ Color Limit‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ‪ Color Add‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﯽء ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﯽء ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺷﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﮐﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﯽء ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Color limit‬ﻫﺮ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﯽء ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺷﯽء ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪:‬ﺷﻴﺌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺷﯽء ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ‪Custom Color‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ From‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﯽء ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﯽء ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ To‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﯽء ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Direct Palette‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺷﻴﺌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﯽء ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﯽء ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ Direct Access‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Forward Rainbow‬ﻳﮏ ﺭﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Reverse Rainbow‬ﻫﻢ ﺭﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪Fish Eye‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﮐﺞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭﻟﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪Heat Map‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺮﺩی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﮏ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪Invert‬‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪Magnify‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪Tinted Grayscale‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽء ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﯽء ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ Grayscale‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪Transparency‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﺷﯽء ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﯽء ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪Wireframe‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻮﺭﻝ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﻮﺭﻝ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ‪ RGB‬ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ) ‪ (Red-Green-Blue‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ CMYK‬ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ) ‪ ( Cyan-Magenta-Yellow-Black‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ CMYK‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻨﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﺷﯽء ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﻧﯽ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺯ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﺷﯽء ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺮﺑﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Eyedropper Tool‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪ Eyedropper Flyout‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺷﯽء ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Eyedropper Tool‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺷﯽء ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Shift‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺷﯽء ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺷﯽء ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺷﯽء ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-1‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Eyedropper‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Sample Color‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺷﯽء ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Sample Size‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Eyedropper‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Select from Desktop‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ Object Color‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﯽء ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی ‪ Properties‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی ‪ Transformations‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ ,‬ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﯽء ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی ‪ Effects‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﺪی ‪ Paintbucket tool‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ Eyedropper‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Shift‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Eyedropper‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪ Paintbucket‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﻟﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Smart Fill Tool‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪ Smart Too flyout‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﯽء ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪-2‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Paintbucket‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Fill Color‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Use drfault‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺒﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ specify‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ No Fill‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﯽء ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Outline Options‬ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺯ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﺷﯽء ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Outline Width‬ﺯﺧﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﺰﺭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Window‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Dockers‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Color‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Color‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Fill‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Outline‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺟﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Window‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Dockers‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Color Palette Browser‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-4‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ‪Color Palette Browser‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Creates a new empty color palette‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Creates a new palette from selected objects‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫‪Creates a new palette from the‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪Open the palette‬‬ ‫‪ document‬ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Editor‬ﻫﻢ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Opens a palette‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Color Styles‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪Window‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Dockers‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-5‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ‪Color Styles‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ New Color Style‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪New Child‬‬ ‫‪ Color‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-6‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Create a New Child Color‬‬

‫‪ Color name‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Tint‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Create‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Create‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻی ﺁﻥ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪,‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺷﺒﺎﻫﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Edit Color Style‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪Pallete‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Models‬ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-7‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ - New Color Style‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Models‬‬

‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ‪ Palette‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺰ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺩی ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪Options‬‬ ‫‪ Add To Palette‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Value‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺩی ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Swap Colors‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ﻭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Gamut‬‬ ‫‪ alarm‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻴﻄﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻮﺭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻴﻄﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Color Viewers‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ‪ Name‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Mixers‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-8‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ - New Color Style‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Mixers‬‬

‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ‪ Hue‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Primary‬ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ , Complement ,‬ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪Triangle1‬ﺳﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Rectangle‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ Triangle2‬ﻫﻢ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭی ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ Pentagon‬ﭘﻨﺞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Variation‬ﻫﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ None‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ 5‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪ .‬ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪ Warmer .‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪ Darker .‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ Lighter .‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Less Saturation‬ﻫﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺧﻠﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ‪ Name‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Palettes‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﭘﺎﻟﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﺎﺩﺭی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ Open‬ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ .cpl‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ‬ ‫‪ Help‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪ Name‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ CorelDRAW Help‬ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-9‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ - New Color Style‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Palettes‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪی ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Edit Color Style‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-10‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Edit Color Style‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ‪ Saturation‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺧﻠﺼﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ‪ Brightness‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Color Name‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ‪ Auto-Create Color Style‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭی ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺷﯽء ﻭ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫‪ Use fill colors‬ﻭ ‪ Use outline colors‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻴﮏ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Automatically link similar‬‬ ‫‪ colors together‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺷﯽء ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Convert child palette colors to CMYK‬‬ ‫ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ CMYK‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ‪Parent creation‬‬ ‫‪ index‬ﻫﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ‪ Manny parents‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻬﻢ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ‪ Few parents‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Preview‬ﻫﻢ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Window‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Color Palettes‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Open Palette‬ﻫﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺗﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ Color Palette Browser‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Palette Editor‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-11‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Palette Editor‬‬

‫‪Edit‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﻻی ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ Color‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Add color‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Delete Color‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ‪ Sort Colors‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫‪ Name‬ﻫﻢ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ New Palette‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Open Palette ,‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Save‬ﻭ ‪ Save As‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪Fill Flyout‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪Uniform Fill Dialog‬ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩﮐﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ‪ Fountain Fill‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-12‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Fountain Fill‬‬

‫‪ horizontal‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ‪ Type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫‪ Vertical‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﻳﯽ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Angle‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Step‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Edge Pad‬ﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﯽ ﻭ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﯽ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Two color‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪To‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ‪ From‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ ‪ Midpoint‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻌﮑﺲ‪.‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﻫﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪,‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻑ ﭘﺎﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Custom‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ Position‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Others‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Select Color‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Presets‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Pattern Fill Dialog‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-12‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Pattern Fill‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ 2-color‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Front‬ﻭ ‪ Back‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Import‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Delete‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻭ ‪ Create‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Origin‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Size‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Width‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ height‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Transform‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫‪ Rotate Skew‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫‪ Row or column offset‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﻧﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺷﯽء ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Transform fill with object‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻴﮏ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺗﻴﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Mirror Fill‬ﻫﻢ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ Full Color‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫‪ Bitmap‬ﻫﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Texture Fill‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-12‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Texture Fill‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ‪ Texture library Dialog‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫‪ Texture list‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺭﻭی ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Preview‬ﻫﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﯽ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﺪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ option‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Texture option‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Bitmap Resolution‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Maximum tile‬‬ ‫‪ width‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﮐﺰﻳﻤﻮﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﮐﺎﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Postscript Fill Dialog‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-13‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Postscript Fill Texture‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Posyscript‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺗﻴﮏ ‪ Preview‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ Postscript‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Parameters‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬ﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽء ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ No Fill‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺷﯽء ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Color Docker Window‬ﻫﻢ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ‪Color‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪Interacive Fill Flyout‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Interactive Fill Tool‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Fill flyout‬ﺭﺍ‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Mesh Fill‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺗﻮﺭی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪Shape Tool‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Curve‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-14‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Mesh Fill‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

4 ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻮﺭﻝ‬

www.parsbook.org

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻮﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Toolbox‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Text tool‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ F8‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺯ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻨﺮی ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ )‪ Convert To Paragraph Text (Artistic Text‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫‪ Arrange‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﯽء ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﮐﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Arrange‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Convert To Curve‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ‪ STUDENT‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﮏ ﺗﮏ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺁﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Arrange‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Break Apart‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Ctrl+K‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﯽء ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Group‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫‪ Arrange‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺒﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Arrange‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Combine‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Text‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-1‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Text‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪X‬ﻭ‪ Y‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺭﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻭ ﺍﻗﻔﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Angle of Rotation‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪Mirror‬‬ ‫ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﭙﯽ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫‪.‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺯﺧﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪,‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫‪ Horizontal Alignment‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ‪ Ctrl+M‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Show/Hide Drop Cap‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ)ﺭﻭﺵ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ(‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ‪ Character Formatting‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-2‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ‪Character Formatting‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺩﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Character Effects‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Character Shift‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Script‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﭼﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Edit Text‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ‪ Ctrl+Shift+T‬ﻫﻢ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Edit Text‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Options‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Options‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ Select All .‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫‪ Change Case‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫‪ Sentence Case‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Lowercase‬ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ UPERCASE‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Tile Case‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻫﻢ ‪ toGGLE cASE‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺒﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ Find Text‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Find Text‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Replace Text‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺯ ﮐﺎﺭ ‪Replace Text‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺒﮏ ‪ Find Text‬ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Spell Check‬ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﯽ ﭼﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ Grammatik‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮ ﭼﮑﻤﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Thesaurus‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻴﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Show Font‬ﻭ ‪ Show Toolbar‬ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻫﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Text Options‬ﻫﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Options‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Text‬ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪Paragraph Text‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Text‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Paragraph Text‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-3‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Paragraph Formatting‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ‪ Alignment‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ‪ Spacing‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ‪ ,‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ‪,‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ‪ Indent‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻭﺭﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫…‪Tabs‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Tabs‬ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Text‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻭﺭﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-4‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Tab settings‬‬

‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Tabs‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Alignment‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﺒﻬﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ Decimal‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Leeder‬ﻫﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Preview‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺘﺮ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺎﻡ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﺑﺪ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Leader Options‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭ ‪ Character‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺒﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Spacing‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻫﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫…‪Columns‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫‪ Columns‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Text‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-5‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Column Settings‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Number of columns‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Width‬ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Gutter‬ﻫﻢ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Equal column width‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻴﮏ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫‪ Right-to-left-column‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ‪Maintan current frame width‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ‬ ‫‪ Automatically adjust frame‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Text‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Bullets‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-6‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Bullets‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Use bullets‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻴﮏ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Font‬ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Symbol‬ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Symbol‬ﻫﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Size‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Baseline shift‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﺖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Use hashing indent stye for bulleted lists‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪Text frame to bullet‬‬ ‫ﺗﻴﮏ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ‪ Bullet to text‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Drop Cap‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Text‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Drop Cap‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺒﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-7‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Drop Cap‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Use drop cap‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻴﮏ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Number‬‬ ‫‪ of line dropped‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻂ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻭ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺒﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫‪ Space after drop cap‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻴﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Use hashing indents style for drop cap‬‬ ‫ﮐﺸﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Edit Text‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Insert Character‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Insert Symbol Character‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ‪ Insert Character‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-8‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ‪Insert Character‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Code Page‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Keystroke‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺯﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Character Size‬ﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Insert‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Insert Formatting Character‬ﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Fit Text To Path‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Fit Text To Path‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ Align To Baseline‬ﻭ ‪Straighten Text‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Fit Tet To Path‬ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Straighten Text‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Align To Baseline‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-9‬ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Straighten Text‬ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪Align To‬‬ ‫‪ Baseline‬ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Text‬ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Paragraph Text Frame‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Show Text‬‬ ‫‪ Frame‬ﻗﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Fit Text To Frame‬ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺍﺭﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Link‬ﺩﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Unlink‬ﻫﻢ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭی ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍی ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﮑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﮑﺴﺘﮕﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Hyphenation‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Text‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Use Hyphenation‬‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Hyphenation Settings‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-10‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Hyphenation Settings‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Automatically hyphenate Paragraph Text‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Break capitalized words‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻫﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ Break words using ALL CAPS‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Minimum word length‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ‪ Minimum characters before‬ﻭ ‪Minimum‬‬ ‫‪ characters after‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ Distance from night margin‬ﻫﻢ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪Writing Tools‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ QuickCorrect‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Options‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-11‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Options‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Quickcorrect‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Capitilize first letter of sentences‬ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﺜﻼ ‪ book‬ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ) ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪ ( GOod‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Correct two initial consecutive capitals‬ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ )ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ‪ ( Good‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎی ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Capitalize name of days‬ﻫﻢ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ languages‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Text Language‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Grammatick , Spell Check‬ﻭ ‪ Thesaurus‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻮﺭﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Encode‬ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-12‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Text Encoding‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Make The Text Compatible‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺏ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﺷﮕﺮ‪ HTML‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Convert‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻨﺮی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Text Statistics‬‬ ‫ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Statistics‬ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺗﯽ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ‪ ,‬ﺧﻂ ‪ ,‬ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪-13‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪Stastistics‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Show Non-Printing Characters‬ﻫﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎپ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪www.parsbook.org‬‬